Table of Contents

Introduction 4

Instrument Cluster 12
Warning and control lights 12
Gauges 16
Entertainment Systems 20
AM/FM stereo 20
AM/FM stereo cassette 22
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 25
AM/FM stereo with CD 29
CD changer 32
Climate Controls 36
Heater only 36
Manual heating and air conditioning 37
Lights 39
Headlamps 39
Turn signal control 41
Bulb replacement 42
Driver Controls 49
Windshield wiper/washer control 49
Steering wheel adjustment 50
Power windows 53
Mirrors 54
Speed control 57
Message center 60

1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table of Contents
Locks and Security 65
Keys 65
Locks 65
Anti-theft system 67
Seating and Safety Restraints 72
Seating 72
Safety restraints 77
Air bags 90
Child restraints 99
Driving 110
Starting 110
Brakes 114
Transmission operation 118
Trailer towing 145
Roadside Emergencies 175
Getting roadside assistance 175
Hazard flasher switch 176
Fuel pump shut-off switch 176
Fuses and relays 177
Changing tires 182
Jump starting 193
Wrecker towing 198
Customer Assistance 200
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 208
Cleaning 209

2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications 216
Engine compartment 218
Engine oil 219
Battery 222
Fuel information 230
Air filter(s) 247
Part numbers 254
Refill capacities 254
Lubricant specifications 258
Accessories 271

Index 275

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company

3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.

4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction

Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the

safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration
(e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter.

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.

Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.

5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed to allow parts to adjust
themselves to other parts.
Drive your new vehicle for at least 800 km (500 miles) before towing a
trailer or snowplowing.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during
the first few thousand kilometers (miles) of operation, since these
additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.

6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
Data Recording
Computers in your vehicle are capable of recording detailed data
potentially including but not limited to information such as:
• the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and
passengers,
• information about the performance of various systems and modules in
the vehicle, and
• information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system
status.
Any of this information could potentially including information regarding
how the driver operates the vehicle potentially including but not limited
to information regarding vehicle speed, brake or accelerator application
or steering input. This information may be stored during regular
operation or in a crash or near crash event.
This stored information may be read out and used by:
• Ford Motor Company.
• service and repair facilities.
• law enforcement or government agencies.
• others who may assert a right or obtain your consent to know such
information.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.

Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should

NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag unless the
air bag can be and is turned OFF.

7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and
maintenance of your diesel-powered light truck.

Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.

Using your vehicle with a snowplow

For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.

Using your vehicle as an ambulance

If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.

8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the
Certification label. The label is
located on the driver’s side door
pillar or on the rear edge of the
driver’s door. You can determine
whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s
recommendations by directly
contacting that manufacturer. Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package is
only available on certain 6.0L Diesel
engine equipped vehicles.

Notice to owners with vehicles equipped with Power Take Off

(PTO) capability
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating vehicles equipped with PTO.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner
Guide for all other required information and warnings.

9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front

Air Bag-Side Child Seat

Child Seat Installation Child Seat Lower

Warning Anchor

Child Seat Tether

Brake System
Anchor

Brake Fluid -
Anti-Lock Brake System
Non-Petroleum Based

Traction Control AdvanceTrac

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield Rear Window

Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist

10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power Windows
Power Window Lockout
Front/Rear
Interior Luggage
Child Safety Door
Compartment Release
Lock/Unlock
Symbol

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Battery Acid
or Sparks

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Power Steering Fluid MIN

Level

Emission System Engine Air Filter

Passenger Compartment
Jack
Air Filter

Check fuel cap Low tire warning

11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

Check fuel cap (if equipped):

Illuminates when the fuel cap may
not be properly installed. Continued
driving with this light on may cause
the Service engine soon warning
light to come on. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Check gage: Illuminates when any CHECK
of the following conditions has
occurred: GAGE
• The engine coolant temperature
is high.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The fuel gauge is at, or near empty.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or
in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system
warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately
from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake
indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.

Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has ABS
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the
supplemental restraint system has been detected.

13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.

Charging system: Illuminates when

the battery is not charging properly.

Check air suspension

(if equipped): Illuminates when
CHECK
the air suspension switch is turned SUSP
OFF, the load limit is exceeded or
the air suspension requires servicing.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at, or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).

Speed control: Illuminates when

the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.

Transmission Tow/Haul Feature

(5–speed automatic
transmission) (if equipped): The
ON light on the end of the gearshift
lever illuminates when the Tow/Haul
feature has been selected. Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission
function and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.

Transmission control indicator

light (TCIL) (4–speed automatic
transmission) (if equipped): OVERDRIVE
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned OFF, refer to the Driving chapter. If the light flashes
steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.

14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Four wheel drive low LOW
(if equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is engaged. RANGE
Four wheel drive indicator 4x4
(if equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive is engaged.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.

Turn signal: Illuminates when the

left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the

ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACC position and the driver’s door is
opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (and the key is not in the ignition) and
the driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 5 Km
(3 mph).

15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
GAUGES

Speedometer: Indicates the

current vehicle speed.

Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine
and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.

Odometer: Registers the total

kilometers (miles) of the vehicle.

16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the
kilometers (miles) of individual
journeys. To reset, depress the
P RN D
D 2
control.

Tachometer: Indicates the engine

speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.

Battery voltage gauge (manual

transmission only): Indicates the
battery voltage when the ignition is
in the ON position. If the pointer
moves and stays outside the normal
operating range (as indicated by
arrows), have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked as soon as possible.

Engine oil pressure gauge:

Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle
checked at your dealership or by a
qualified technician.

17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Refer to Filling the tank in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information..

Transmission fluid temperature gauge

(automatic transmission only):
If the gauge is in the:
White area (normal) - the
transmission fluid is within the
normal operating temperature
(between “H” and “C”).

Yellow area (warning) — the

transmission fluid is higher than
normal operating temperature. This
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing
or off road use). Refer to Special
Operating Conditions in the
scheduled maintenance guide for
instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods of
time with the gauge in the yellow
area may cause internal transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.

18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Instrument Cluster
Red area (over temperature) —
the transmission fluid is overheating.
Stop the vehicle to allow the
temperature to return to normal
range.

If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your Ford dealer.

19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO

5 6 7 1 2

VOL
PUSH
ON
TONE TONE VOL ST DX
FM
SEEK
12
CLK TUNE

1 2 3 4 AM/FM

4 3

1. Seek: Press / to find the

next strong station down/up the
frequency band.
2. Tune: Press / to manually
change radio frequency down/up.
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a
frequency band in radio mode. AM/FM

4. Memory preset buttons: To set

a station: Select frequency band 1 2 3 4
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.

20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
5. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.

6. Tone: Press TONE until the VOL

PUSH
ON
desired level — Bass, Treble, Fade TONE
appears on the display. Turn the
CLK
volume control to raise/lower the
levels, or to move the audio sound
from the right to left or the front to
back (if equipped).
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,
TONE
press and hold CLK until CLOCK
SET appears in the display. Press CLK
SEEK to decrease or
increase the hours.
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK set appears in the
display. Press TUNE to decrease or increase the minutes.

21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE

12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4
VOL - PUSH ON

AM FM1 ST CLK
BASS TREB BAL FADE
FM TAPE
AMS

11
SEEK SIDE 1-2
SCAN EJ
10 TUNE
REW FF

9
1 2 3 4 5 6

8 7 6 5

1. Balance: Press to shift sound to

the left/right speakers.

2. Fade: Press to shift sound to the

rear/front speakers.

3. CLK: To set the hour, press and CLK

hold CLK. Then press SEEK to
decrease or increase the
hours.
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease
or increase the minutes.
4. Tape AMS: In tape mode, press TAPE
AMS
and hold to activate Automatic
Music Search (allows you to quickly
locate the beginning of the tape selection being played or to skip to the

22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
next selection). Then, press REW (for the beginning of the current
selection) or FF (to advance to the next selection). The tape MUST have
a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.

5. Side 1–2: Press to change tape SIDE 1-2

direction.

6. REW (rewind): Press to rewind REW

the tape.

FF (fast forward): Press to FF

advance the tape.

7. Memory preset buttons: To set

a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

8. Dolby威 noise reduction: Works in tape mode only. Reduces tape

noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate.

9. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a brief

sampling of all listenable radio
stations or all tape selections. Press
again to stop.

10. Tune: Works in radio mode only.

Press TUNE / to change
frequency down/up

11. Seek: Press and

release / for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.

23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
12. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.

13. AM/FM: Press to choose a

frequency band in radio mode.

14. Bass: Press / to

decrease/increase the bass output.

15. Treble: Press / to

decrease/increase the treble output.

16. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a EJ

tape.

17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door.

24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD

1. Power/volume: Press to turn

ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease
volume.

2. Scan: Press to hear a brief SCAN

sampling of all listenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
3. CD Door: Insert a CD with the
label side up.

25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
4. Cassette door: Insert the
cassette with the opening to the
right.

5. Eject: Press to eject the

cassette/CD. The radio will resume
playing.

6. Tape: Press to start tape play.

Press to stop tape during
rewind/fast forward.
CD: Press to start CD play. With the
dual media audio, press CD to
toggle between single CD and CD
changer play (if equipped).
7. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again return to playing
media.

8. Auto: Press to set first six

strongest stations (if available) into
AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons;
press again to return to normal
stations.

9. Clock: Press and hold to set the

clock. Press the SEEK to
decrease hours or SEEK to
increase hours. Press the TUNE
to decrease minutes or TUNE to
increase minutes. If your vehicle has a stand alone clock this control will
not function.

26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
10. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL / to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.

Fade: Press FADE; then press

SEL / to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.

11. Memory preset buttons: To

set a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM, tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
12. Shuffle (CD): Press to play
tracks in random order.

13. Compression (CD): Press to

bring soft and loud passages
together for a more consistent
listening level.
14. Dolby威 noise reduction:
Works in tape mode only. Reduces
tape noise and hiss; press to
activate/deactivate.
15. Side 1–2: Works in tape mode
only. Press to play reverse side of
the tape.

16. Fast Forward (FF): Press for FF

a slow advance, press and hold for a 2
fast advance.
17. Rewind (REW): Press for a REW
slow rewind, press and hold for a 1
fast rewind.

27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
18. Select (SEL): Use with Bass, SEL
Treble, Balance and Fade controls.

19. Bass: Press BASS; then press

SEL / to decrease/increase
the bass output.

Treble: Press TREB; then press

SEL / to decrease/increase
the treble output.

20. Tune: Works in radio mode only. SEEK

Press TUNE / to change TUNE

frequency down/up.

21. Seek: Press and release

SEEK / for previous/next
strong station, selection or track. SEEK

TUNE

22. AM/FM: Press to select

AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM

1. Seek: Press and release

SEEK / for previous/next
strong station, or track of current
disc.
2. Rewind: Press for a slow rewind,
press and hold for a fast rewind.

Fast forward: Press for a slow

advance, press and hold for a fast
advance.
3. Comp (Compression): In CD mode, press to adjust the soft and loud
passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP
control until COMP ON is displayed.
4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again return to playing
media. In CD mode, MUTE acts as a
pause feature.
5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press
and hold to auto eject all loaded
discs.

29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL / to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
SEL / to decrease/increase
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade controls to adjust
levels. Use with MENU to set the
clock and engage RDS.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL / to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL / to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access clock mode, RDS on/off,
Traffic, Program type, Show type
and Compression modes.
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format.
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase ( ) or decrease
( ) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.

30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press to move between CDs.
This radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls which
allow you to set up to six AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1
and six in FM2).
11. CD: Press to select CD mode.
Seamless play: In CD mode, the
transition between the end of one
CD and the beginning of another will not contain delay time unless SEEK
or a preset control is pressed.
12. AM/FM: Press to select a
frequency band in radio mode.
Autostore: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press and momentarily hold AM/FM.
AUTOSTORE will flash on the display. When the six strongest stations
are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are
less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the
remaining presets. Press again to disengage.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.

14. Load: Press to load a CD. Press

and hold to load up to six discs.

15. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in

random order on the current CD.
Press SHUF to cycle through SHUF
TRAC, SHUF DISC or SHUF OFF.
16. Scan: Press to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.

31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press
or to manually tune down or up
the frequency band.
CD: Press or to select the previous or next track on the CD.
18. CD door: Insert a CD label side
up.

CD CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)

Your CD changer is in one of the following locations:
• Behind the passenger’s seat
• In the center console
• Under the rear bench on the driver’s side (see instructions below)
• In the stowage bin on the passenger’s side
1. Slide the door to access the CD
changer magazine.
2. Press to eject the magazine.

3. Turn the magazine (A) over.

A B
4. Using the disc holder release
knob (C), pull the disc holder (B)
out of the magazine.

Do not pull too hard on the disc holder as the disc holder may come
completely out of the magazine. If this happens, reinsert the disc holder
back into the magazine while pressing on the lever.

32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
5. Line up the CD with the groove
of the disc holder. Ensure that the
label on the CD faces downwards.
6. Press the disc holder until it locks
securely into the magazine.

Ensure that the disc holder is

evenly inserted and at the same A
level as the magazine (A). The unit
will not operate if the disc holder is
not inserted at the same level (B).

If your CD changer is located under the rear bench, the following

instructions apply to load discs:
1. Load the discs into the magazine 6
5
slots (numbered 1 through 6 on the 4
6 COMPACT DISC MAGAZINE
3
window) one at a time with labeled 2
1

surfaces upward. (The holders DO

NOT pull out. )
2. Begin with the bottom slot number 1.
3. Insert the loaded magazine into the CD changer with the arrow
pointing toward the changer.
To remove discs:
1. Slide the corresponding lever on the opposite side of the magazine
window. The disc will partially eject.
2. Remove the disc.
Radio power must be turned on to play the CDs in the changer. The
magazine may be stored in the glove box when not being used.
The CD magazine may be inserted or ejected with the radio power off.
ONLY use the magazine supplied with the CD changer, other types will
damage the unit.

33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
Keep the CD changer door closed. Coins and foreign objects will damage
the CD player and void your audio system warranty.
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can effect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.

34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Entertainment Systems
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.

35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.

Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe”
using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
2. Set the temperature control to full heat
3. Set the fan speed to HI

36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Climate Controls
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls
the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument
panel vents only.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.

Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position.

37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Climate Controls
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
2. Select A/C
3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to HI
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.

Autolamp control (if equipped)

The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
To change the delay time of the
autolamp feature, do the following:
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected.
2. Deselect the autolamps.
3. Put the ignition in RUN.
4. Put the ignition in OFF.
5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a
10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will
turn on.
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time
(maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn off.

39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the , or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
In autolamp mode, the foglamps
won’t be operational until lighting
conditions warrant the activation of the headlamp/parklamp lighting.
Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light will illuminate when the switch is pulled and the
parklamps are on.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamp or autolamp
position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.

40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.

PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Move the control to the full down
position, past detent, to prevent the interior lights from illuminating
when the doors are opened.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.

TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.

41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
COURTESY/READING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The dome lamp lights when the
control is in the DOOR (left)
position, any door is open, the
instrument panel switch is pushed
past the detent and when any of the
remote entry controls are pressed
while the ignition is off.
The reading lamps can be turned on
by pressing the rocker controls next
to each lamp.
MAP LAMPS
With trip computer

Without trip computer

To turn on the map lamps, press the control next to each lamp.
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an

42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of Trade number
bulbs
Headlamps (aerodynamic) 2 9007
Headlamps (sealed beam) 2 H6054
Park/turn 2 3157
Sidemarker 2 194
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker 2 3157 K
Backup 2 3156K
High-mount stoplamp 1 921
Foglamp 2 899
License plate lamp 2 168
Cargo lamp 2 906
Roofmarker 5 194
(a)
Rear fender clearance* 4
Interior visor lamp (if equipped) 4 194
Rear identification 3 194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer
(a)
Replace entire lamp assembly; bulb is not serviceable.
* Dual rear wheels or if equipped.

Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)

1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position open the
hood.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.

43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
3. Remove bulb retainer ring by
turning it counterclockwise, then
slide the ring off the plastic base
4. Pull bulb out of headlamp
assembly.

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of

children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position and open the hood.
2. Remove the two screws and
parking lamp/side marker assembly
by pulling gently
3. Disconnect the electrical
connectors from the parking
lamp/side marker assembly and
remove.

4. Remove the four bolts and

headlamp bezel.

44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
5. Remove the four screws and the
headlamp retaining ring from
headlamp.
6. Disconnect the electrical
connector and remove headlamp.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position and open the hood.
2. Remove the two screws and
carefully disengage parking
lamp/turn signal assembly from the
vehicle.

3. Rotate bulb socket

counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.

4. Carefully pull bulb straight out of

the socket and push in the new
bulb.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs — F250/F350 only
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
tail lamp assembly and carefully pull
the lamp assembly from the tailgate
pillar by releasing the two retaining
tabs.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing brake/tail/backup lamp bulbs — F450/F550 only
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.

46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brakelamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the two screws and lamp
assembly from vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Replacing roof marker bulbs

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)

1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.

48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.

Windshield washer: Push the end

of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.

Changing the wiper blades

1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance.

49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Tow/Haul feature
(5–speed automatic
transmission) (if equipped)
To activate, press the transmission
control switch (TCS) located on the gearshift. The ON indicator light will
illuminate on the gearshift. The transmission will operate in all gears.
Press the transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow Haul
mode. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will
automatically return to normal mode with Tow Haul feature deactivated.
Overdrive cancel
(4–speed automatic OVERDRIVE OFF
transmission) (if equipped)
To deactivate overdrive, press the
transmission control switch (TCS) located on the gearshift. The OFF
indicator light will illuminate on the gearshift. The transmission will
operate in all gears except overdrive. Press the transmission control
switch again to return to normal overdrive mode. When you shut off and
re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal
(Overdrive) mode.
For additional information about the gearshift and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Driving chapter.

50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
Press the OPEN control to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open slightly and can be moved to
full open.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.

Install a garage door opener (if equipped)

The storage compartment can be used to hold a variety of aftermarket
garage door openers. To install your garage door opener:
1. Open the storage compartment
door.
2. Remove the storage clip and stow
it away.
3. Place the Velcro娂 strip onto the
back of the garage door opener
control.
4. Adhere the back of garage door
opener control to the Velcro娂 strip
found inside the storage
compartment. Make sure that the controls for the garage door opener
face outward.

51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
5. Place the height adjusters onto
the back of the storage
compartment door. Add as many
adjusters needed to activate the
garage door opener.
6. Close the storage compartment
door and press the garage door
opener control to verify that it
works. If not, you may need to add
more adjusters.

One-touch moon roof (if equipped)

With trip computer

Without trip computer

To open the moon roof using the one-touch operation switch:

• Press and release the rear portion of the one-touch moon roof control.
• To halt motion at any point during one-touch opening, press the
control a second time.
To close the moon roof:
• Press and hold the front portion of the moon roof control. Release the
control to stop the roof closing at any position.

52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
To tilt the moon roof:
• To tilt into the vent position (when the glass panel is closed), press
and hold the front portion of the moon roof control. To close from the
vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the control until the
glass panel stops moving.
Sliding shade:
• The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually
opened or closed when the glass panel is shut.
• To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the vehicle.
When closing the moon roof, you should verify they are free of
obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the moon roof opening.

AUXILIARY POWER POINT

Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not POWER POINT

hang any type of accessory or

accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter. Use the power point.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

When closing the power

windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and
ensure that children and/or pets
are not in the proximity of the
window openings.

Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window.
Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window.

53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.

Window lock (if equipped)

The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.

Accessory delay (if equipped)

With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
any door is opened.

POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)

To adjust your mirrors
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror
or R to adjust the right mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
disable the adjust function.

54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Both main mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog. The mirrors are
automatically activated when the
vehicle is started.
Note: The mirrors may be hot to
the touch but will not burn. This is
a normal condition.
The mirror heating elements are
designed to operate regardless of
the geographic location of the vehicle. There is no switch to turn on, or
other operator involvement required other than to start the vehicle.
The spotter mirror, below the main mirror, is not heated and must be
adjusted manually.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.

Signal mirrors (if equipped)

When the turn signals of the vehicle
are activated, the outer portion of
the appropriate mirror housing will
blink amber.
The turn signal feature can be seen
by other drivers who may approach
from the rear of the vehicle.

55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
Running lamps
Illuminates when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on.
This provides additional visibility of
your vehicle to other drivers on the
road.

Fold-away mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a
garage with the trailer tow mirror.

The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend

approximately 76 mm (3 inches). This feature is especially useful to the
driver when towing a trailer.

56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P(Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.

The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum

travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.

SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 48 km/h (30 mph)
or more without keeping your foot on the pedal. Speed control does not
work at speeds below 48 km/h (30 mph).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.

Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
3. Press the SET ACCEL control
and release it.
RES

4. Take your foot off the accelerator

SET
pedal. ACCEL

5. The indicator light on the COAST

instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.

Resuming a set speed

Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically RES
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RES control will not SET
ACCEL

work if the vehicle speed is not

faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). COAST

Increasing speed while using speed control

There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
RES

• Press and hold the SET ACCEL

SET
control until you get to the ACCEL

desired speed, then release the

COAST
control. You can also use the SET
ACCEL control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in increments by
1.6 km/h (1 mph).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.

58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed: RES

• Press and hold the COAST

SET
control until you get to the ACCEL

desired speed, then release the COAST

control. You can also use the
COAST control to operate the
Tap-Down function. Press and
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in increments by
1.6 km/h (1 mph).
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
RES
press the SET ACCEL control.
SET
ACCEL

COAST

Turning off speed control

There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicles previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.

Indicator light (if equipped)

This light comes on when either the
SET ACCEL or RES controls are
pressed. The vehicle speed must be
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It
turns off when the speed control
OFF control is pressed, the brake or
clutch is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.

59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/CD holder
• Coin holder
• Pen holder
• Writing surface
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.

CELL PHONE USE

The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.

TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)

The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on
the trip computer for a display of status.
The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on
your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same.
The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position.
Trip computer features are as follows:

60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
Selectable features

English/metric display
Press this control to change the trip
computer display between metric
and English units.

Mode control
Each press of the MODE control will
display a different feature as follows:
Average fuel economy. The
display will indicate the vehicle’s
average fuel economy in liters/100
km (or miles/gallon) since the
average fuel economy was last reset.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles
traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for
the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest liter (gallon)
To reset the average fuel economy:
1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is
displayed (this is the only resettable display).

61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
2. Press the E/M and MODE
controls simultaneously. The display
will illuminate the “AVG” indicator.
While the indicator is lit, release
both controls to reset the average
fuel economy.

Fuel range. This displays the approximate number of kilometers (miles)

left to drive before the fuel tank is empty.
On vehicles equipped with dual tanks, displays the approximate number
of kilometers (miles) left to drive before the active fuel tank is empty.
The display will update when the fuel tanks are switched.
The indicated distance to empty may be inaccurate:
• with sustained, drastic changes in fuel economy (such as trailer
towing), but will eventually recover.
• if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline.
• if less than 30 liters (8 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank.
The fuel range function will flash for five seconds at the following
distances based on fuel remaining and fuel economy calculations:
• 80 km (50 miles)
• 40 km (25 miles)
• 16 km (10 miles)
Outside air temperature
The temperature can be displayed in
Centigrade or Fahrenheit by
pressing the E/M control.
If the outside temperature falls
below 3°C (38°F), the display will
alternate from “ICE” to the outside
temperature at a two second rate
for one minute.
Off. In this mode the display is off.
Compass
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.

62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel
range modes and temperature modes.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and
calibration of the compass.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone 3 2 1 15
map.
4 14
2. Locate the trip computer on the
overhead console. 13
5
3. Turn ignition to the ON position. 12

6 7 8 9 1011
4. Press and hold both trip computer
controls. After approximately four
seconds, the trip computer will enter
zone setting mode. Zone setting
mode is indicated when the display
lights the “ZONE” indicator.
5. Release both controls. Subsequent
pressing of either control will
increment the zone. Press the control repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the trip computer.
6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory,
release both controls for greater than five seconds.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console.
2. Start the vehicle.

63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driver Controls
3. Press and hold both trip
computer controls. After
approximately eight seconds, the
trip computer will enter CAL mode.
CAL mode is indicated when the
display lights the “CAL” indicator.
4. Release both controls. The display
will return to normal, except that the
CAL indicator will remain lit until the compass is successfully calibrated.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until the
CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete calibration.
6. The compass is now calibrated.
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to prevent
theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.

Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow
more room for loading.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the
spring clip (on each connector) past
the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
3. Disconnect the other cable.
4. Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.
6. Lift left side off of its hinge.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.

64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.

POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)

Press control to unlock all doors.

Press control to lock all doors.

Smart locks (if equipped)

This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door will
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, or
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).

65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage
the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage
childproof locks.

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.

66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.

If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership, to
aid in troubleshooting.

Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.

Locking the doors

1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will flash
if all the doors are closed and locked.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed and locked. Note: the doors will lock again, the horn
will chirp once, and the parking lamps will flash once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps.
Power door unlock disable feature (if equipped)
The UNLOCK feature on your power door locks will not work from
inside the vehicle when:
• the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, and
• 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using
the remote entry transmitter, or the power door unlock control (while
the accompanying door is open).

67
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
The UNLOCK feature will work again after:
• a door has become ajar,
• the ignition is turned to the ON position, or
• using the UNLOCK control on your remote entry transmitter.
This feature is initially turned off, but may be turned on by following the
instruction in the activation/deactivation procedure provided.
Power door unlock disable feature — activation/deactivation
1. Turn the ignition key to ON, then
press the UNLOCK button 3 times.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF,
then press the UNLOCK button 3
times.
3. Turn the ignition key to ON,
within five seconds press the
UNLOCK button 2 times then LOCK
once.
The user should receive 2 horn chirps to indicate the system has been
disabled or 2 chirps followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Pressing the power door LOCK button two times again will turn the
feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON.
Every two consecutive presses of the LOCK button after successfully
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition
of the feature.
Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to ACC
or ON to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the OFF
position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent. The typical operating range for your
remote entry transmitter is approximately 10 meters (33 feet). A
decrease in the operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,

68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
• structures around the vehicle and
• other vehicles parked next to the vehicle.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF
THE REMOTE ENTRY
TRANSMITTER APART.
2. Remove the old battery.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery.
4. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
4
1. Ensure the vehicle is 3
electronically unlocked.
5
2. Put the key in the ignition.
2
3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK)
position to 3 (OFF).
4. Cycle, eight times, rapidly (within 1
10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)
position and 4 (ON). Note: The
eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.

69
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20
seconds have passed, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF
position for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the
dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left
on.
Autolock (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
• the ignition is in the RUN position,
• all doors are closed,

70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Locks and Security
• the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph) and
• the vehicle is traveling more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met:
• the vehicle’s speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN
position, and
• the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and
• the vehicle is traveling more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and
all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated. Note: Pressing the power door
lock/unlock control again will toggle between activating and deactivating
the autolock feature.
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.

71
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.

Full bench seat (if equipped)

• Lift the release bar to move the
seat forward or backward. Ensure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull up on the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.

72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure the seat is relatched into
place.
• Pull the handle on the side of the
seat up to recline the seat.
• Push down the lever located at
the bottom of the seatback to
quickly fold the seatback forward.

40/20/40 front seat armrest and console (if equipped)

To release the armrest, pull forward
on the strap and pull the armrest
down. Lift up armrest to return it to
a center seatback.

73
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest, lift
the latch to open the lid. The lid
cannot be opened in the upright
position.

Captain’s chair (if equipped)

• Lift the bar to move the seat
forward or rearward. Make sure
that the seat is relatched into
place.
• To recline the seatback, pull the
release lever handle located on
the side of the seat up.
• Push down the lever (if
equipped) located at the bottom
of the seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.

Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)

The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Your vehicle will only be equipped with one of the two controls shown.

74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
• Type A

• Type B

Press to raise or lower the rear

portion of the seat cushion.
• Type A

• Type B

• Type A
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.

75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• Type B
Press the control to move the seat
forward or backward.

Using the manual lumbar support

For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.

Heated seats (if equipped)

To operate the heated seats, do the following:
• Push control to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.

The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.

The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes.

FOLDING UP THE REAR SEATS

(IF EQUIPPED — SUPERCAB ONLY)
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be
flipped up into the seatback position.

76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Pull lever to release seat cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.

RETURNING THE SEAT TO SEATING POSITION

Always be sure that the seat is in a latched position, whether the
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.

1. Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage
position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

77
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a safety belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt

assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.

Combination lap and shoulder belts

1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

The front outboard and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes
described below:

Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h
(5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
On SuperCab and CrewCab models, the front seat belt system can also
be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt.
Rear seat belts (if equipped) cannot be made to lock up by pulling
quickly on the belt.
Automatic locking mode
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.

79
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

• Grasp the shoulder portion and

pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.

How to disengage the automatic locking mode

Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the front passenger and rear outboard
seat belt systems must be checked by a qualified technician to
verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is
still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked
for proper function.

80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if

the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.

Energy Management Feature

• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard seat belt systems have a retractor assembly that is
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.

Safety belt replacement label

The short plastic boot on the front
safety belt at the passenger
outboard anchor location covers a
“Replace Belt” label on the safety
belt.

81
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
In the event of a collision, the
colored label (REPLACE BELT)
may become visible. If this occurs,
the safety belt must be replaced.

Whenever the yellow

portion of the label is
visible, the safety belt must be
replaced.

Failure to follow these

instructions will affect the
performance of the safety belts
and increase the risk of personal
injury.

Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat
(which has shoulder belts attached to the corners of the front seat
back), it is equipped with a buckle pretensioner. Do NOT place objects
between the seats, this could interfere with the functioning of the
pretensioner. For the SuperCab and CrewCab base bench seats and all
Regular Cab seating positions, the safety belts are equipped with a
retractor pretensioner.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions
with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a
device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during
some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle

82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.

Front safety belt height adjustment

The front outboard seats are equipped with belt height adjusters.
If your vehicle is equipped with seat integrated restraints (SIR), you will
not have a safety belt height adjuster.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
• Regular Cab and 4–door CrewCab

• 4–door Super Cab (if equipped)

To adjust the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down. Release the button and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.

83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.

• 1st row center seating position

The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.

Shorten and fasten the belt when

not in use.

• 2nd row center seating position (if equipped)

The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and
with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue

84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach
the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out
again.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
is turned to the ON position... warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
while the indicator light is warning chime turn off.
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...

BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.

85
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The BeltMinder feature is
buckled before the vehicle has activated - the safety belt warning
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) light illuminates and the warning
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed chime sounds for 6 seconds every
since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds, repeating for
turned to ON... approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not
while the safety belt indicator light activate.
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not
before the ignition switch is turned activate.
to the ON position...
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day. The more we
events” drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
“Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
uncomfortable” you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds
us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
work” death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.

86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Reasons given... Consider...

“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothes” than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
“The people I’m Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
with don’t wear often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
belts” Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
thrown clear” times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.

One time disable

Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission).
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position.
• All vehicle doors are closed.

87
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled.
• The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure).
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.

BeltMinder activation and deactivation procedure

1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes.)
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder
warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled.
• After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by the safety belt
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by:
• The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three
seconds.
• Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off.
• Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.

88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm
(8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.

Safety belt maintenance

Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified
technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.

Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.

89
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

50 60
40 70 2
F 30 80
100 3 VOL - PUSH ON
60
H 120 80 AM FM1 ST

20 40 1 FM BASS TREB BAL FADE AUTO

SET
140 DIESEL FUEL ONLY
90
20 4
H 10 160
18 MPH km/h SEEK
0 100 RPM x 1000
TUNE
SCAN EJ
DOLBY B NR

TAPE CD
DISCS

REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE

1 2 3 4 5 6

P
OFF
O
A/C
MAX
A/C
RES
ON
SET
ACCEL

OFF
COAST

Important SRS precautions

The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always

properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back

seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)

recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.

90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.

To properly position yourself away from the air bag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.

Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing

objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag

supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.

The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to

an occupant in the center front seating position.

Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle

(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.

Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect

the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.

Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow

attachment hardware may effect air bag deployment in a crash.
Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow
attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle.

91
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and air bags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch.

How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?

The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Air bags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also

92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air
bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.

If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.

The SRS consists of:

• driver and passenger (if equipped) air bag modules (which include the
inflators and air bags),
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags),
• one or more impact and safing sensors,
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.

93
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.

Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles

(including pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.

Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch

An air bag ON/OFF switch

has been installed in this PASSENGER AIR BAG
vehicle. Before driving, always OFF
look at the face of the switch to ON
be sure the switch is in the proper OFF
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure
to put the switch in a proper
position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a
collision.

94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Turning the passenger air bag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF position while removing the
key. ON
OFF

2. When the ignition is turned to the OFF

ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger air
bag is deactivated.
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.

In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always

remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch.

Turning the passenger air bag back on

The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON. PASSENGER AIR BAG
2. The OFF light will briefly
OFF
illuminate when the ignition is ON
turned to On. This indicates that the OFF
passenger air bag is operational.

If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger air bag switch
is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.

95
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically designed to function together
with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your
air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was
designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.

If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and
child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be
transported in front, the passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is
because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag
and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is
substantial.

The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air
bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening
injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a
potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce
the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall
safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the air bags.

96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and
allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation
criteria.

97
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation
criteria.

98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less) ride in your vehicle,
you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check
your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always
place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.

Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.

99
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.

Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with

lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs.
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.

101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

booster seat.

Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.

Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can

slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seats

Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.

102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether
anchor. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching
child safety seats with tether straps. in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.

Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed

in the front seats, unless the passenger airbag On/Off switch is
turned off. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in this chapter.

103
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER put a
rear-facing child seat in the front unless the passenger air bag
switch is turned off. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the way back and turn the passenger air
bag off. See Passenger air bag on/off switch.

An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats
should never be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
air bag switch is turned off, See Passenger air bag on/off switch.

Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front

seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt

and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the

automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard.

6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.

105
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with knee on the
child seat.

8. Allow the safety belt to retract to

remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an
anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket
mounted to the body shell on the back panel.

106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

• F—Series Regular Cab

• F—Series SuperCab

• F—Series Crew Cab

Tether strap attachment

1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
4. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before

107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
installing the child seat. Refer to the Folding down the rear seats
section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats.
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Front seat (SuperCab only)

• Front seats (Regular Cab) and

Rear seats (Crew Cab only)

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat

may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.

6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and

shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further
instructions to secure the child safety seat.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.

Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only

There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for child
safety seat tether straps.

108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.

2. Attach the strap hook onto the

loop behind an adjacent seating
position.

3. Install the child safety seat tightly

using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.

A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.

109
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
STARTING

Positions of the ignition

1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to 4
3
operate while the engine is not
running. 5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 2
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal. For
vehicle equipped with a manual 1
transmission, you must depress the
ignition release lever to release the
key.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal
being depressed.
When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic
transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position
without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always set the parking brake.

4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key

position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.

110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high

temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed

areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. The following starting instructions are for vehicles equipped
with a gasoline engine; if your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine,
refer to Starting the engine in the your Diesel owner guide supplement.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and safety restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.

111
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.

• Make sure the gearshift is in P

(Park).

If starting a vehicle with a manual

transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.

112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
• Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
4
3
5
2

Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a

light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
4
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then 3
release the key as soon as the
5
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter. 2

Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.

113
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in
a region where temperatures reach
-23° C (-10° F) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least
three hours before starting the
vehicle. The heater can be plugged
in the night before starting the
vehicle. The plug for the block
heater is exposed in the front of the
vehicle, beneath the grille. Vehicles
equipped with a gasoline engine have the plug exposed on the driver
side of the vehicle; vehicles equipped with a Diesel engine have the plug
exposed on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.

Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.

114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor
and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; any
pulsation or mechanical noise you may feel or hear is normal.
ABS warning lamp ABS

The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when

the ignition is turned to ON. If the light does not illuminate during start
up, remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need to be
serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.

115
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops. The BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster
illuminates and remains illuminated
until the parking brake is released.
To release the brake, pull the
release lever. to prevent the pedal
from releasing too quickly, place
your left foot on the parking brake
pedal, then pull the release lever,
making sure the pedal fully releases.
You may want to pull the release
lever again to make sure the parking
brake is full released.
Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First)
(manual transmission).

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the engine

may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking
brake is set. It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this
operation.
If you’re parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the
vehicle may be overloaded.

116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a safety belt.

Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

117
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle

differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic
transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position
without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.

Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic

transmission (if equipped-gasoline engines only)

P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.

119
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
(Overdrive) can be deactivated
by pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever. This will illuminate the O/D
OFF lamp and activate Drive.
Note: If the Overdrive OFF light flashes steadily at any time, have the
system serviced immediately.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off regardless of last mode of operation.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.

120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission)
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100
automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using
an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is
maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected
or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive
strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers
(miles) of operation.
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other
throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician as soon as possible.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped-Diesel engines only)

Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in

the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability, and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed, the strategy must be relearned.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear

121
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.

The ON light on the end of the

gearshift lever will illuminate when
it is activated.

Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.

Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the

122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The ON light will no
longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
3 (Third)
Transmission operates up to third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

123
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

R 1 3 D

L 2 4

Using the clutch

The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking
brake.
4. Move the gearshift lever to the desired gear, then slowly release the
clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch
pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These
actions will reduce the life of the clutch.

124
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Recommended shift speeds
Downshift according to the following charts for your specific
engine/drivetrain combination:
Maximum downshift speeds1
6-speed transmission
Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped)2
2H or 4H 4L
D (Overdrive) - 72 km/h (45 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph)
4
4-3 56 km/h (35 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph)
3-2 32 km/h (20 mph) 13 km/h (8 mph)
2-1 8 km/h (5 mph) 3 km/h (2 mph)
1 - LO Only shift to LO when at a stop.
1
Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles.
2
Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from (Overdrive).
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.

Removing the key

Turn the ignition off, push the release lever (located above the ignition),
then turn the key toward you and remove the key.

125
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 5 km/h (3 mph). The system is not
effective at speeds above 5 km/h (3 mph) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in

reverse and when using the RSS.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or

moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.

126
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to 2
meters (6 ft.) from the rear bumper
with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper,
(refer to the figures for approximate
zone coverage areas). As you move
closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the
obstacle is less than 25.0 cm (10
in.) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side
of the vehicle, the tone will sound
for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS may have reduced
performance or an increased chance
of false detection if the tailgate is
not locked and in the upright position. If the tailgate is down, the RSS
tone may be heard intermittently or continuously. The tone may also be
heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gear selector is placed in OFF
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control allows the driver to
turn the RSS on and off. To turn the
RSS off, the ignition must be ON,
and the gear selector in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the
control will illuminate when the
system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is
not turned off, it may indicate a failure in the RSS.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

127
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.

When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four

wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
driving power is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Manual 4x4 system (if equipped)
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.
• For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hub
locks are set to the same
position (both set to LOCK or both set to FREE).
Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern.
Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to
a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission
placed in N (Neutral ) (on automatic transmissions or the clutch
pedal depressed on manual transmissions).
The 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.

128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
• is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
• auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
• automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
• For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hub
locks are set the same (both
set to AUTO or both set to
LOCK).
4WD system indicator lights
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your
Ford dealer as soon as possible.
• 4x4 - momentarily illuminates
after the engine is started. 4x4
Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High)
or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged.
• LOW RANGE – momentarily LOW
illuminates when the ignition is
turned to the ON position. RANGE
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged.
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
2H (2WD High) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4WD High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels.

129
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
N (Neutral) – Only used when towing the vehicle.
4L (4WD Low)– For low-speed off-road applications that require extra
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
Sends power to front and rear wheels.
Shifting from 2H (2WD High) to 4H (4WD High)
Engage the locking hubs by rotating
the hub lock control from FREE to
LOCK, then move the transfer case
lever from 2H (2WD High) to 4H
(4WD High).
• For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hubs
are set to LOCK.

• Do not shift into 4H (4WD

High) with the rear wheels 2H
slipping. 4H
N
4L

Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 2H (2WD High)

Move the transfer case lever to 2H
(2WD High) at a stop or any 2H
forward speed up to 88 km/h (55 4H
mph).
With the vehicle at complete stop, N
disengage the locking hubs 4L
(optional) by rotating the hub lock
control from LOCK to FREE.
• For proper operation, make sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are aligned, and that both hubs are set
to FREE

130
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 4L (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or
depress the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L 2H
(4WD Low). 4H
5. If the transfer case will not
engage into 4L (4WD Low), drive N
the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph), 4L
then repeat steps 1 through 4.

Shifting from 4L (4WD Low) to 4H (4WD High) or 2H (2WD High)

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or
depress the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H 2H
(4WD High) or 2H (2WD High). 4H
5. If the transfer case will not
disengage from 4L (4WD Low), N
drive the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 4L
mph), then repeat steps 1 through
4.
6. If shifting to 2H (2WD High) with the vehicle at a complete stop,
disengage the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control
from LOCK to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backwards.

131
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
This position should only be used
when towing the vehicle. 2H
4H
N
4L

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.

Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)

Positions of the electronic shift system

The electronic shift 4WD system is designed to allow up to 45
seconds before a shift command is performed. In the event that
conflicting shift commands are selected, allow up to 45 seconds
for the shift command to be performed prior to reporting any
shift concerns to your dealer.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
2H (2WD High) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4WD High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels.
4L (4WD Low)– For low-speed off-road cond applications that require
extra power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the
water. Sends power to front and rear wheels.

132
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High)
Rotate the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH position at speeds up to 88 4X4
4X4
km/h (55 mph). 2WD
HIGH LOW

• The electronic shift 4WD

system is designed to engage
4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when
the vehicle is moving. If
shifted to 4x4 HIGH (4WD
HIGH) while at complete stop,
4x4 may not engage and the
4x4 indicator may not
illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 8 km/h (5 mph).
• Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.

Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High)

Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at
any forward speed. Disengagement 4X4
HIGH 4X4
2WD LOW
of the transfer case and front hubs
may be delayed due to torque bind
which is caused by driving on dry
hard surfaces or performing tight
turns while using the 4WD system.

• You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage

your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the
system to immediately disengage.

Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).

133
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
LOW position. 4X4
HIGH 4X4
2WD LOW
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
LOW RANGE indicator light
illuminates.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not illuminate within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift
concerns to your dealer.
Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD
(2WD High)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD 4X4
HIGH 4X4
High) position. 2WD LOW

5. Hold the shift conditions until the

LOW RANGE indicator light shuts
off.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not shut off within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.

134
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement

• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.

135
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and

four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

If your vehicle gets stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.

Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster

chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,

136
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.

Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.

137
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows
you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving
chapter. Information on transfer
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.

138
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.

139
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.

140
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle
is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Tires, Replacement Requirements
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that
originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, and/or serious
personal injury or death.

Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealer.
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires
larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use
these tires for highway driving.
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor
Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure as well as the increased
risk of loss of vehicle control.
Do not use “aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications,
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels.
These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or rollover and
serious injury.

141
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more
likely to blow out or fail.
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure
even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire.
Each day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required. Check tire pressure with a
tire gauge every few weeks
(including spare). Safe operation
requires tires that are neither
underinflated nor a vehicle which is
overloaded.
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary
repairs.
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities

142
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
Power take off (PTO) capability (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with Power Take Off (PTO) capability. These
vehicles have a special transmission case, internal components and
calibration for PTO usage.
The PTO can be used during mobile and stationary
continuous/intermittent applications.
Gasoline engine:
PTO operation is disabled while the vehicle is in Overdrive (the TCIL will
not be illuminated), in N (Neutral), during engine cranking. Transmission
upshift and downshift schedules will be reduced by about 15% and will
have a firmer shift feel during PTO mobile applications.
The PTO cannot be disabled while the transmission is in D (Drive)
(Overdrive position with Overdrive canceled), 2 (Second) or 1 (First).
Refer to the Body Builder’s Layout Book for recommended electrical
installation.
Diesel engine:
The Auxiliary Powertrain Control Module (APCM) will elevate the engine
speed to 1,200 RPM when in PTO mode. PTO operation will be disabled
in stationary drive idle conditions. For more information on the APCM
and PTO operation with the Diesel engine, refer to the APCM manual
supplied with your vehicle.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of
the wheel rims (for cars). Traction or brake capability may be limited
and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake
and severely damage your engine.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle
slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do
not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. Driving through deep
water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow
water into the transmission and cause internal transmission
damage.

143
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
VEHICLE LOADING
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms:
• Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or
aftermarket equipment.
• Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight
rating minus base curb weight.
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload
weight.
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum allowable total
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo.
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the
Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer.
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum allowable
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo)
and the loaded trailer.
• Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing
vehicle.
• Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
• Trailer Weight Range: Specified range of trailer weight from zero to
the maximum trailer weight rating.
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when
figuring the total weight.
The Safety Certification Label, located on the driver’s door pillar, lists
vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment,
refer to these limitations.

144
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment is
within the weight limitations, including both gross vehicle weight and
front and rear gross axle weight rating limits.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, and/or personal injury.

Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.

Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.

Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer Towing
section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your
vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart.
This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be
below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth wheel trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the
following charts.

145
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
2nd unit bodies are not included in maximum trailer weight ratings. The
weight of the additional “body” must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. The
following trailer towing charts apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline
engines; for Diesel engines, refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct
Injection Turbo Diesel Supplement.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster

chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
F-250 Regular Cab Pickup
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3537 (7800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4217 (9300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4807 (10600)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6394 (14100)
fifth wheel)

146
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-250 Regular Cab Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3537 (7800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4217 (9300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 5079 (11200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6439 (14200)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3357 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4037 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4625 (10200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6213 (13700)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3356 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4036 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4897 (10800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6258 (13800)
fifth wheel)

147
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-250 SuperCab Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3356 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4036 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
fifth wheel)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4944 (10900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
fifth wheel)

148
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-250 SuperCab Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4763 (10500)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
fifth wheel)
F-250 Crew Cab Pickup
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3945 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
fifth wheel)

149
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-250 Crew Cab Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3945 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4807 (10600)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3083 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3764 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4625 (10200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5957 (13200)
fifth wheel)

150
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3538 (7800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4218 (9300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4807 (10600)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6394 (14100)
fifth wheel)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3537 (7800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4218 (9300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 5080 (11200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6441 (14200)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3357 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4037 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4625 (10200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6213 (13700)
fifth wheel)

151
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3356 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4036 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4899 (10800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
fifth wheel)
F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3401 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4081 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3447 (7600)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4081 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4944 (10900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)

152
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4716 (10400)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
F-350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel Pickup
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3356 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4126 (8900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
fifth wheel)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4897 (10800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
fifth wheel)

153
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4716 (10400)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
fifth wheel)

154
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
fifth wheel)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4763 (10500)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
fifth wheel)

155
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3083 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3764 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4353 (9600)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5941 (13100)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5941 (13100)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3083 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3764 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4580 (10100)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5941 (13100)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5941 (13100)
fifth wheel)

156
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
fifth wheel)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3265 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3945 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4808 (10600)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3083 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3764 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4399 (9700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
fifth wheel)

157
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4625 (10200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
(without
fifth wheel)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
fifth wheel)
F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4445 (9800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
fifth wheel)

158
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
fifth wheel)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4263 (9400)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5850 (12900)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5850 (12900)
fifth wheel)

159
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel Pickup

Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5850 (12900)
(without
fifth wheel,
with
optional
14,000 lb.
hitch)
6.8L (with 4.30 9072 (20000) 5851 (12900)
fifth wheel)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3311 (7300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3992 (8800)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4808 (10600)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3084 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3765 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)

160
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel

Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3084 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3765 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4627 (10200)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3175 (7000)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3856 (8500)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2903 (6400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3583 (7900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4172 (9200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5759 (12700)

161
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel

Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4445 (9800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5806 (12800)
F-350 SuperCab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4671 (10300)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2903 (6400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3583 (7900)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4218 (9300)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4445 (9800)

162
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel

Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4264 (9400)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5851 (12900)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5851 (12900)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4309 (9500)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3039 (6700)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3719 (8200)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4309 (9500)
4x2 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3039 (6700)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3719 (8200)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4580 (10100)

163
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x4 with manual transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2812 (6200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3493 (7700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4128 (9100)
4x4 with automatic transmission
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2858 (6300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3538 (7800)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4354 (9600)
F-350 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 9200 (4173)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5761 (12700)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4400 (9700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5761 (12700)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5534 (12200)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4172 (9200)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5532 (12200)

164
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel

Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6577 (14500)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7530 (16600)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8437 (18600)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6441 (14200)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7394 (16300)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8301 (18300)
F-450 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6441 (14200)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6260 (13800)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7167 (15800)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8074 (17800)

165
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-450 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6350 (14000)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7257 (16000)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8165 (18000)
4x4 with manual transmission
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6214 (13700)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7121 (15700)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8029 (17700)
F-550 Regular Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7484 (16500)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8391 (18500)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)

166
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving

F-550 SuperCab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel

Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7121 (15700)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8029 (17700)
F-550 Crew Cab Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel (Fifth Wheel
Towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
4x2 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7212 (15900)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8119 (17900)
4x4 with automatic transmission
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7076 (15600)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 7983 (17600)

Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.

167
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Load equalizing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher
than in Step 2.
Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is
higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load
equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking
up trailer lamps.

168
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2,270
kg (5,000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a 4–speed automatic
transmission: To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, use a
lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional
information, refer to the Understanding the positions of the 4–speed
automatic transmission section in this chapter.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a 5–speed automatic
transmission: To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, activate
the Tow/Haul feature. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For
additional information, refer to the Understanding the positions of
the 5–speed automatic transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for
more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.

169
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
• Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses
caused by water entering into your trailer’s electrical wiring.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked
unless a leak is suspected.
ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) VEHICLES
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel
drive capability.
An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to
ensure that your transmission is not damaged.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph).
• Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles).
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.

170
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
RWD vehicles with 4x4 electronic shift transfer case or All Wheel
Drive (AWD) vehicles with automatic transmissions:
Regarding recreational towing or having your vehicle towed, 4x4 vehicles
with electronic shift on the fly and AWD vehicles cannot be towed with
any wheels on the ground (with the exception of moving it as a disabled
vehicle off the road out of traffic).
SNOWPLOWING
Note: Do not use your vehicle to snowplow until it has been driven at
least 800 km (500 miles). Follow the severe duty schedule in your
scheduled maintenance guide for engine oil and transmission fluid
change intervals.
Note: Ford does not install snowplows.
For low speed snow removal, Ford offers a Snowplow Package Option on
select 4x4 vehicles. To assist Ford dealers and equipment installers
further prepare the vehicle for snowplowing, Ford includes instructions
in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book and Ford Truck Source
Book. These instructions are available through your Ford dealer; they
include the list of vehicle models recommended for snowplowing and
snowplow weight limits. Use of the Snowplow Package Option, or its
equivalent, along with these instructions will help avoid possible
powertrain and chassis damage from snowplowing.
The front and rear GAWR, GVWR, Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
(TARC) and tire inflation pressures are found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on one of the vehicle’s door jambs. This label
is applied to all vehicles completed by Ford Motor Company. Incomplete
vehicles built by Ford Motor Company will have an Incomplete Vehicle
Label in place of the Safety Compliance Label. The TARC does not apply
to Incomplete Vehicles and will not be shown on the Incomplete Vehicle
Label. The weight of the vehicle with occupants must never exceed the
front and rear GAWR or the GVWR.
The TARC is the weight of the permanently attached equipment that can
be added to the vehicle without violating the vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification. This includes the snowplow mounting hardware but does
not include the removable portion of the snowplow assembly.
Installing the snowplow
Read the following instructions before installing a snowplow:
• Front GAWR must not exceed 63% of the GVW. Add ballast weight to
the back of the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label to find your vehicle’s front GAWR.

171
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
• The Front Axle Accessory Reserve Capacity and the TARC listed on
the bottom right of the Safety Compliance Certification Label will
determine whether or not the addition of a snowplow will overload
your vehicle.
• The weight of the snowplow and supporting components distributed to
the front axle must not exceed the Front Axle Accessory Reserve
Capacity.
• The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must
not exceed the TARC.
• The weight of the installed snowplow and aftermarket equipment must
not load the vehicle beyond the GAWR (front/rear) and GVWR listed
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
• The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must be
considered part of the payload and must not exceed the GCWR for
towing.
• Federal and most local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional
information.
• Tires have their maximum inflation pressure and associated load rating
imprinted on the tire sidewall. This pressure may or may not be the
same as that shown as recommended on the vehicle. The vehicle
operator may have to adjust the tire inflation pressure to
accommodate the snowplow and payload. Consult your dealer or
equipment installer for help with proper inflation pressures.
• Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional
information.
• After installing a snowplow to the vehicle, ensure the vehicle’s front
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if
required). These specifications are located in the vehicle’s Workshop
Manual.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Removing snowplow
After removing a snowplow from the vehicle, ensure the vehicle’s front
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if
required).

172
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
Snowplowing with your air bag-equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in
certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the

snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible air bag deployment.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.

Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect

the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.

Engine temperature while plowing

When driving with a snowplow, your engine may run at a higher
temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving more than 24 km (15 miles) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 24 km (15 miles) at speeds up to 64 km/h
(40 mph) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade
position to provide maximum airflow.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.

173
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Driving
4WD operation while plowing
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) when plowing in small
areas at speeds below 8 km/h (5 mph).
• Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when plowing larger
areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 24 km/h (15
mph).
• Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
• If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
It is the owner’s responsibility to avoid engine overheating which
can cause damage.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

174
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000
km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• changing a flat tire
• jump-starts
• lock-out assistance
• limited fuel delivery
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.

175
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.

ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY

In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH RESET

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.

176
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, by the kick
panel access cover.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check of leaks.

FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15

fuses before replacing any electrical

components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.

177
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue — Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural — Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box

The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse panel cover,
turn the panel fasteners
counterclockwise.

178
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller
tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.

The fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Location Rating Description
1 15A* Adjustable pedals
2 — Not used
3 — Not used
4 20A* Power point - instrument panel
5 — Not used
6 20A* Trailer tow turn/stop relay
7 30A* High beam headlamps/Flash to pass
8 15A* Backup lamps (Diesel engine only)
9 20A* Heated mirrors
10 10A* A/C clutch
11 20A* Radio (main)

179
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

Location Rating Description
12 20A* Cigar lighter / OBD II
13 5A* Power mirrors/switches
14 15A* Daytime running lamps (DRL)
15 — Not used
16 — Not used
17 15A* Exterior lamps
18 20A* Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch (high)
19 10A* Body security module/4x4 module
20 10A* Fuel Injection Control Module (FICM)
relay (Diesel engine only)
21 — Not used
22 20A* Engine control
23 20A* Engine control (gasoline engine only),
Climate control (Diesel engine only)
24 2A* Brake pressure switch/Speed control
25 10A* 4-Wheel Anti-lock Brake System (4WABS)
module, Variable Fan Control (VFC)
(Diesel engine only)
26 10A* Air bags
27 15A* Ignition switch Run feed
28 10A* EATC module/Front blower relay coil
29 10A* Customer access
30 15A* Highbeam headlamps
31 15A* Clutch interlock switch (manual
transmissions only), Transmission range
sensor (automatic transmissions only)
then to starter relay coil (all
transmissions), 4x4
32 5A* Radio (start)
33 15A* Front wiper
34 10A* Brake on-off switch
35 10A* Instrument cluster

180
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

Location Rating Description
36 10A* PCM Memory
37 15A* Horn
38 20A* Trailer tow park lamps
39 15A* Trailer tow back-up lamps
40 20A* Fuel pump
41 10A* Instrument cluster
42 15A* Delayed accessory
43 10A* Fog lamps
44 — Not used
45 10A* Ignition switch Run/Start feed
46 10A* Left-hand lowbeam
47 10A* Right-hand lowbeam
48 — Not used
101 30A** Trailer tow electric brake
102 30A** Door locks/Body security module
103 50A** Ignition switch (gasoline engine only),
FICM power (Diesel engine only)
104 40A** Heated backlight
105 30A** Fuel heater (Diesel engine only)
106 30A** Front wiper main
107 40A** Front blower motor
108 — Not used
109 30A** Heated seats
110 50A** Ignition switch
111 30A** 4WD/Shift on the fly
112 30A** Left-hand power seats
113 30A** Starter motor
114 30A** Right-hand power seats
115 20A** Trailer tow battery charge
116 30A** Ignition switch
601 30A CB*** Window motors, Moonroof

181
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

Location Rating Description
602 60A** 4WABS module
210 — Not used
211 — Backup lamps relay (Diesel engine only)
212 — Not used
301 — Front blower motor relay
302 — Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay
303 — Fuel heater relay (Diesel engine only)
304 — Heated backlight relay
305 — Trailer tow battery charge relay
306 — Delayed accessory relay
307 — Starter relay
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses ***Circuit Breaker
Note: (Diesel engine only) The Fuel Injection Control Module (FICM)
logic 15A mini-fuse is located in the underhood relay block.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may
compromise the integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants
may also affect your tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped).

Spare tire information

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire that can be used as
either a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire is not equipped with wheel
trim. The wheel trim from the original wheel/tire may be used on the
spare.

182
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different

size than the road tires should not be used. Use of such a tire
could result in damage to driveline components and an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.

Location of the spare tire and tools

The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool Location
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only) Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack, jack handle and lug wrench Regular cab, crew cab and
SuperCab without rear bench seat:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
SuperCab with rear bench seat:
Under rear bench on passenger
side
Key, spare tire lock In the glove box
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
• one handle extension and one
typical extension. To assemble,
align button with hole and slide
parts together. To disconnect,
depress button and pull apart.
• one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
square end of jack handle.

183
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
• Vehicles equipped with dual
rear wheels, insert the lug
wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.

2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A)

to the jack handle (B).

3. Fully insert the jack handle

through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube. The key and lock
will engage with a slight push and
counterclockwise turn. Some
resistance will be felt when turning
the jack handle assembly.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare tire until you
can slide the tire rearward and the
cable is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.

184
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
Tire change procedure
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
• Automatic transmission: Place
gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Manual transmission: Place
gearshift lever in R (Reverse).
• Electronic Shift On the Fly 4WD:
Place transfer case in any
position.
• Manual shift transfer case 4WD:
Place transfer case in 2H, 4H or
4L.

To prevent the vehicle from

moving when you change a
tire, be sure the parking brake is
set, then block (in both
directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side
and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.

2. Turn engine off and block the diagonally opposite wheel (block not
provided).
3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.

185
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.

When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set
and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.

The following steps apply to F250/F350 only:

6. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
7. Position the jack according to the
following guides:

• Front (4x2)

186
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
• Front passenger side (4x4)

• Front driver side (4x4)

Make sure the jack fits into the
notched area next to the differential
housing.

• Rear

187
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.

8. Turn the jack handle clockwise

until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
10. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles.
If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve
stem must be facing outward. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve
stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to step 19.
The following steps apply to F350 Chassis Cab F450/F550 only:
12. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.

188
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
13. Position the jack according to the following guides:
• Front (4x2) F350

• Front (4x2) F450/550

• Front driver side (4x4)

189
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
• Front passenger side (4x4)

• Rear

14. Insert the jack handle into the

pump linkage.
15. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.
Hydraulic jacks are equipped
with a pressure release valve
that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack’s rated capacity.
16. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
17. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
18. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more
controlled rate of descent.

190
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
The following steps apply to all vehicles:
19. Remove the jack and fully 1
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. 6 7
20. Stow the flat tire. Refer to
Stowing the spare tire if the 4 3
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire
carrier.
21. Stow the jack, jack handle and 8 5
lug wrench. Make sure the jack is 2
securely fastened so it does not
rattle when driving.
22. Unblock the wheels.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 800 km (500 miles) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 160 km (100 miles), and again at 800 km (500
miles) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
Nm Lb-ft
M14 x 1.5 200-225 150-165
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,

apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut. Do not
apply motor oil to the wheel nut
threads or the wheel stud threads.

191
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or

foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of
control.

Stowing the flat/spare tire

1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your dealer for
assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance guide), or at any
time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.

192
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic

transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the
catalytic converter may become damaged.

Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.

193
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the jumper cables

+
–

+
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

–
+

–
+

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.

194
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

+
–

+
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.

–
+

–
+

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed

metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

195
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the jumper cables

+
–

+
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

–
+

–
+

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the

booster vehicle’s battery.

196
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies

+
–

+
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.

–
+

–
+

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

197
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift or a
slingbelt with T-hooks.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.
However, a slingbelt with T-hooks and a wheel dolly can also be used if
all four wheels are off the ground.
An alternative for towing a 4x4 vehicle with a manual 4WD system is to:
• put the transfer case in neutral, then put the 4WD shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• unlock the front hub locks (refer to Four wheel drive [4WD]
Operation [if equipped] in the Driving chapter).

198
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Roadside Emergencies
• lift the rear wheels of the vehicle using a wheel lift or a sling belt with
T-hooks.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

199
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized
dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are
needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.
Repairs can be made at Lincoln Mercury dealers, however Jaguar, Land
Rover, Mazda, Volvo and Aston Martin dealers are not qualified to
perform Superduty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special
training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty
repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the
vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership
cannot assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com

200
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please
have the following information available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).

201
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in
Canada). It provides the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.

202
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives

203
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation

204
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the
Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 5120
Southfield, MI 48086–5120
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

205
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804

206
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km (18,000 miles), whichever occurs
first:

207
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Customer Assistance
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.

208
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available
from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.

209
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.

210
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the

running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and
Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow
these tips:
• The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23),
available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.

211
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in

contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Ford Extra Strength Upholstery
Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

212
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH
F–250 AND F–350 CREWCAB)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
For King Ranch F-250 and F-350 CrewCab leather seats, refer to
separate section in this chapter.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-250 AND F-350
CREWCAB ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading
of the material.
CLEANING
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
First use a damp cloth then wipe with a dry cloth. Allow the area to dry,
then apply conditioner.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning
information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING
(5464).
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.

213
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
SCRATCHES
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
CONDITIONING
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking
delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish
lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the
leather.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada)
(F2AZ—19530–A)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)

214
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cleaning
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in
Canada) (B7A-19520–AA)
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(E8AZ-19523–AA)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Tire Detailer (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name

215
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.

216
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N
(Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
HOOD

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and

release the auxiliary latch located
under the right center of the hood.
Slide the handle to release the
auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.

217
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines

Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.

1. Engine oil dipstick

2. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Battery
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)

218
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Refer to Lubricant specifications
in this chapter.

State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the

use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5° C (40°

F), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil

Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

219
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.

• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.

220
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine oil and filter recommendations

Look for this certification
trademark.

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting
Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all
requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.

221
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.

However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the

battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.

222
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the

end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

For information on transmission operation after the battery has been

disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section.
Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.

223
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Always dispose of automotive

RE
AD
batteries in a responsible manner.

TU
Follow your local authorized

LE

RN
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.

RECYCLE

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant

The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions
in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F).
• Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.

224
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.

MAX
COLD FILL
RANGE
MIN

• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.

Adding engine coolant

When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.

225
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid

container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored

Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification
ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your
vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored),
VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in
Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped
in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle
requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6,
darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
• Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved
recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section).

226
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking Engine Coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.

227
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford
specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine
and cooling system components.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this chapter.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

228
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The and symbol will
illuminate.
• The Service Engine Soon
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to
alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air
pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.

229
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.

5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

230
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or

mishandled.

Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.

231
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.

Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an

ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may

232
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use

87
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly

233
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline
specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control
system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide
Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier
about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada,
look for fuels that display the Auto
Makers’ Choice娂 logo.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more
information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.

234
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.

235
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in kilometers or miles).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters
or gallons).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).

236
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

237
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning

light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.

238
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially

lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By

law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
Engine/Service Engine Soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
Engine/Service Engine Soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light should turn off.
(A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine

239
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON威 ATF.

Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F (-7°
– 25° C):
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this
range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.

240
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
6. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir.

BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR

The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line MAX
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your dealer immediately.

CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide
for the service interval schedules.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification
ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.

During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant or rise slightly. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid
level to the step in the reservoir.

241
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.

TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.

242
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

above 10°C (50°F).

Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20
miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (66°C-77°C ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

[150°F-170°F]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

High fluid level

Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

fluid may cause shift and/or

engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.

243
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician. ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

Automatic transmission fluid filter (if equipped)

The TorqShift automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable external fluid filter
mounted on the frame rail. Refer to
the Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for service intervals.

244
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

3. Fluid level should be at the

bottom of the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant

Specifications in this chapter.

245
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

3. Add only enough fluid through

the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant

Specifications in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers.

246
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element (gasoline engines only)
1. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air filter element in place.

2. Carefully separate the two halves

of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the open end of the air filter
housing.

4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of
the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air
filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow
unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:

247
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance

248
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

SERVICING YOUR TIRES

Checking the tire pressure

• Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.
• Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km
(3 miles).
• Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door.
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury.

249
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Tire inflation information
The F450 and F550 vehicles are equipped with a tire that is an all-steel
radial. All-steel radial tires utilize steel cords in the sidewalls, and also
require increased inflation pressures of up to 95 psi. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and insure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.

WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if

improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and
property.

Tire rotation
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked.
The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear
wheel.

250
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Four tire rotation

• Five tire rotation

251
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
• DRW – Six tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels it is recommended that
front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side, with the
rear tires maintaining original
vehicle position. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.

Replacing the tires

Replace the tires when the wear
band is visible through the tire
treads. Due to exposure to the
elements and exhaust you should
replace the spare tire when you
replace the other tires.

When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or

bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle handling may be affected which can lead to loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.

252
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type,
speed rating, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All
Terrain”, “Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.

Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger

size tires.

Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the

handling of the vehicle, and increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury.

Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also
affect the accuracy of your speedometer.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.

The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.

253
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Air filter element FA-1634 FA-1634
Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S
PCV valve EV-233 EV-233
Battery (Standard) BXT-65-650 BXT-65-650
Battery (Optional) BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Spark plugs-platinum** AGSF-22W AGSF-22W
Automatic Transmission — —
Filter ***
*Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part
numbers.
**Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark
plug gap information.
***Only available with 6.0L Diesel engine/TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-145.

REFILL CAPACITIES
Ford Part
Fluid Application Capacity
Name
Front axle Hypoid Gear Oil F-250/350 2.7L (5.8 pints)
SAE 90 (Dana 60 axle)
F-350/450/550 2.7L (5.8 pints)
(Dana 60 axle)

254
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Ford Part
Fluid Application Capacity
Name
Rear axle 1,2 Motorcraft SAE F-250 /350 3.3L (6.9 pints)
75W-140 (10.50 inch
Synthetic Rear axle)
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE F-350/450 4.0L (8.5 pints)
75W-90 (DANA 80)
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE F-550 11.6L (24.5
80W-90 (Dana 135) pints)
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Brake fluid (and Motorcraft High All Fill to line or
clutch fluid-if Performance step (for clutch)
equipped) DOT 3 Motor on reservoir
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
3
Engine coolant Motorcraft 5.4L V8 engine 25.0L (26.4
Premium Engine with A/C quarts)
Coolant
(green-colored)
or Motorcraft 6.8L V10 engine 27.0L (28.5
Premium Gold quarts)
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE All 5.7L (6.0
(includes filter 5W-20 Premium quarts)
change)-Gas Synthetic Blend
engines Motor Oil
Engine oil Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement
(includes filter
change)-Diesel
engine

255
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Ford Part
Fluid Application Capacity
Name
Fuel tank N/A Mid-ship tank 71.9L (19.0
(optional on gallons)
Chassis Cab)
Right side 87.1L (23.0
saddle mounted gallons)
tank (optional
on Chassis Cab)
Short box 109.8L (29.0
gallons)
Long box 143.9L (38.0
gallons)
Aft axle 151.4L (40.0
gallons)
Power steering Motorcraft All Fill to FULL
fluid MERCON威 ATF COLD range on
dipstick
Transfer case Motorcraft 4x4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0
fluid MERCON威 ATF quarts)
Manual Motorcraft 6-speed manual 5.5L (5.8
transmission MERCON威 ATF quarts) 5
fluid
Automatic Motorcraft 4R100 16.7L (17.7
transmission MERCON威 ATF (4–speed) quarts)6
fluid 4 Motorcraft TorqShift 16.6L (17.5
MERCON威 SP (5–speed) quarts)
6
ATF (includes
remote filter
element change)
Windshield Motorcraft All 4.0L (4.25
washer fluid Premium quarts)
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate

256
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
1
Your vehicle’s rear axle(s) may be filled with a synthetic lubricant that
may require a lubricant change. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide. Axle lubricant quantities should not need to be checked unless a
leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been
submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
2
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3or equivalent
meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok axles.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to
your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service
interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.
MERCON威, MERCON威 V and MERCON威 SP are not
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威, MERCON威 V and
MERCON威 SP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic
transmission application requiring MERCON威 SP may cause
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. The 6–speed
manual transmission is equipped with an in-tank cooler. Verify the fluid
level after operating vehicle to assure correct fluid level.
6
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.

257
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
High E8TZ-19590–A ESA-M1C198–A
Temperature
Spindle bearing 4X4 Front Axle
and Wheel
Bearing Grease
Front axle Hypoid Gear Oil C6AZ-19580–E ESW-M2C105–A
(4X4) SAE 90
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lube 1
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90–GLS –
75W-90
Rear axle Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
(Dana 135
axles) 1
Motorcraft High PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
Brake fluid and Performance and DOT 3
clutch fluid (if DOT 3 Motor
equipped) Vehicle Brake
Fluid

258
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
Engine coolant Motorcraft VC-4–A (in ESE-M97B44-A
Premium Engine Canada,
Coolant Motorcraft
(green-colored) CXC-10)
Motorcraft VC-7–A WSS-M97B51-A1
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H
5W-20 Premium and API
Engine oil
Synthetic Blend Certification
Motor Oil Mark
Hinges, latches, Multi-Purpose XG—4 or XL-5 ESR-M1C159-A
striker plates, Grease or
fuel filler door ESB-M1C93–B
hinge and seat
tracks
Motorcraft XL-1 none
Lock cylinders penetrating and
lock lubricant
Transmission Motorcraft XG-1-C or ESA-M1C75-B
/steering/parking Premium XG-1-K
brake linkages Long-Life Grease
and pivots,
brake and clutch
pedal shaft (if
equipped)
Power steering Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON威
fluid and MERCON威 ATF
transfer case
fluid (if
equipped)

259
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
Manual Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON威
transmission MERCON威 ATF
2
(6-speed)
Automatic Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON威
transmission MERCON威 ATF
2
4R100
(4–speed)
Automatic Motorcraft XT-6–QSP WSS-M2C919–D
transmission MERCON威 SP MERCON威 SP
TorqShift ATF 2
(5–speed)
Motorcraft ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2
Premium
Windshield
Windshield
washer fluid
Washer
Concentrate
1
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of
Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant
that does not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in
water. Dana rear axles also contain a synthetic lubricant but do require a
change. Refer to your “Service Guide” for change intervals on Dana rear
axles.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to
your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service
interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.

260
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
MERCON威, MERCON威 V and MERCON威 SP are not
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威, MERCON威 V and
MERCON威 SP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic
transmission application requiring MERCON威 SP may cause
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

ENGINE DATA
Engine* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 330 415
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
1.3-1.4 mm 1.3-1.4 mm
Spark plug gap
(0.052-0.056 inch) (0.052-0.056 inch)
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1
*Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part
numbers.

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

F250–Regular and Super Cab

Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Super Cab Super Cab
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4 4x2 4x4
(1) Overall 1935 mm 2 005 mm 1 943 mm 2 008 mm
height (76.2 in) (78.9 in) (76.5 in)b (79.0 in)b
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) /
Rear) 1 729 mm 1 729.3 mm 1 729.3 mm 1 729.3 mm
(68 in) (68 in) (68 in) (68 in)
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in)

261
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style

Regular Regular Super Cab Super Cab
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4 4x2 4x4
(4) 3 479.8 mm 3 479.8 mm 3 610.7 mm 3 610.7 mm
Wheelbase (137 in) (137 in) (141.8 in)a (141.8 in)a
4 013.2 mm 4 013.2 mm
(158 in)b (158 in)b
(5) Overall 5 756 mm 5 756 mm 5 878 mm 5 878 mm
length (226.6 in) (226.6 in) (231.4 in)a (231.4 in)a
6 289 mm 6 289 mm
(247.6 in)b (247.6 in)b
a
Short Wheel Base (SWB)
b
Long wheel base (LWB)

F250-Crew Cab
Dimension Body style
Crew Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab
4x2/ Short 4x4/ Short 4x2/ Long 4x4/ Long
box box box box
(1) Overall 1960 mm 2 027 mm 1 957 mm 2 022 mm
height (77.2 in) (79.8 in) (77.0 in) (76.6 in)
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) / (68.3 in) /
Rear) 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
(68.1 in) (68.1 in) (68.1 in) (68.1 in)
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in)
(4) 3 967 mm 3 967 mm 4 379 mm 4 379 mm
Wheelbase (156.2 in) (156.2 in) (172.4 in) (172.4 in)
(5) Overall 6 243 mm 6 243 mm 6 654 mm 6 654 mm
length (245.8 in) (245.8 in) (262 in) (262 in)

262
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
F350–except Crew Cab
Dimension Body style
Chassis Chassis Regular Super Cab
Cab — Cab — Cab Style Style Side
Regular Super Cab Side
Cab
(1) Overall 1 924 mm 1 928 mm 1 938 mm 1 952 mm
height (75.7 in)a (75.9 in)a (76.3 in)a (76.8 in)a,e
1 912 mm 1 931 mm 1 976 mm 1 954 mm
(75.2 in)b (76.0 in)b (77.8 in)b (76.9 in)a,f
2 028 mm 2 029 mm 2 041 mm 1 939 mm
(79.8 in)c (79.9 in)c (80.3 in)c (76.3 in)b
2 031 mm 2 019 mm 2 018 mm 2 051 mm
(80.0 in)d (79.5 in)d (79.4in)d (80.7 in)c,e
2 039 mm
(80.3 in)c,f
2 019 mm
(79.5 in)d
(2a) Front 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
Track (68.3 in)a,b / (68.3 in)a,b / (68.3 in)a,b / (68.3 in)a,b /
1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d
(2b) Rear 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
Track (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c /
1 880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in)a,c / (79.9 in) (79.9 in)a,c (79.9 in)a,c
2 304 mm 2 426 mm 2 426 mm
(90.7 in)b (95.5)b,d (95.5)b,d
2 329 mm
(91.7 in)d

263
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style

Chassis Chassis Regular Super Cab
Cab — Cab — Cab Style Style Side
Regular Super Cab Side
Cab
(4) 3 576 mm 4 110 mm 3 480 mm 3 602 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (161.8 in) (137.0 in) (141.8 in)e/
4 186 mm 4 014 mm
(164.8 in) (158.0 in)f
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 6 267 mm 5 756 mm 5 878 mm
length (225.7 (246.7 in) (226.6 in) (231.4 in)e/
a,b,c,d
in) / 6 289 mm
6 343 (249.7 (247.6 in)f
in)b,d
a
4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)
b
4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
c
4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)
d
4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
e
Short box
f
Long box

F350-Crew Cab
Body style
Dimension Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab —
Cab box long box
(1) Overall 1 929 mm 1 955mm 1 964 mm
height (75.9 in)a/ (77.0 in)a/ (77.3 in)a/
1 941 mm 1998 mm 1991 mm
(76.4 in)b/ (78.6 in)b/ (75.2 in)b/
2 026 mm 1 958 mm 1 957 mm
(79.8 in)c/ (77.1 in)c/ (77.0 in)c/
2 038 mm 2 033 mm 2 031 mm
(80.2 in)d (80.0 in)d (80.0 in)d
(2a) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
—Front (68.3 in) (68.3 in) (68.3 in)

264
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Body style
Dimension Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab —
Cab box long box
(2b) Track — 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
Rear (68.1 in)a,c/ (68.1 in)a,c/ (68.1 in)a,c/
1 803 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in)a,c/ (79.9 in)a,c (79.9 in)a,c
2 304 mm 2 426 mm 2 426 mm
(90.7 in)b/ (95.5 in)b,d (95.5 in)b,d
2 329 mm
(91.7 in)d
(4) Wheelbase 4 475 mm 3 967 mm 4 379 mm
(176.2 in ) (156.2 in ) (172.4 in)
(5) Overall 6 632 mm 6 243 mm 6 654 mm
length (261.1 in) (245.8 in) (262.0 in)
a
4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)
b
4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
c
4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)
d
4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)

F450
Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Super Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis 4x2 Chassis 4x4 4x2/4x4 4x2/4x4
(1) Overall 2 048 mm 2 051 mm 2 045 mm 2 053 mm
a
height (80.6 in) (80.7 in)a (80.5 in) (80.8 in) -
2 044 mm 2 044 mm 4x2
b,c
(80.5 in) (80.5 in) b 2 056 mm
2 038 mm 2 033 mm (80.9 in) -
d
(80.2 in) (80.0 in)c,d 4x4

265
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style

Regular Regular Super Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis 4x2 Chassis 4x4 4x2/4x4 4x2/4x4
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) /
Rear) 1 880 mm 1880 mm 1 889 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.3 in) (74.0 in)
(3) Overall 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 386 mm 2 377 mm
width (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.9 in) (93.6 in)
(4) 3 576 mm 3 576 mm 4 110 mm 4 475 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (140.8 in) (161.8 in) (176.2 in)
4 186 mm 4 186 mm 5 085 (200.2
(164.8 in) (164.8 in) in)
4 795 mm 4 795 mm
(188.8 in) (188.8 in)
5 100 mm 5 100 mm
(200.8 in) (200.8 in)
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 5 733 mm 6 267 mm 6 632 mm
a
length (225.7 in) (225.7 in)a (246.7 in) (261.1 in)e
6 343 mm 6 343 mm 7 241 mm
b
(249.7 in) (249.7 in)b (285.1 in)f
6 952 mm 6 952 mm
c
(273.7 in) (273.7 in)c
7 257 mm 7 257 mm
d
(285.7 in) (285.7 in)d
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base
b
4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base
c
4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base
d
5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base
e
4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base
f
5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base

266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
F550
Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(1) Overall 2 076 mm 2 075 mm 2 067 mm 2 066 mm
height (81.7 in)a (81.7 in)a (81.4 in) (81.3 in)
2 068 mm 2 063 mm
(81.4 in) b,c (81.2 in) b
2 059 mm 2 059 mm
(81.1 in)d (81.1 in)c
2 049 mm
(80.7 in)d
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) /
Rear) 1 880 mm 1880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in)
(3) Overall 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm
width (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in)
(4) 3 576 mm 3 576 mm 4 475 mm 4 475 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (140.8 in) (176.2 in) (176.2 in)
4 186 mm 4 186 mm 5 085 (200.2 5 085 (200.2
(164.8 in) (164.8 in) in) in)
4 795 mm 4 795 mm
(188.8 in) (188.8 in)
5 100 mm 5 100 mm
(200.8 in) (200.8 in)

267
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style

Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 5 733 mm 6 632 mm 6 632 mm
a
length (225.7 in) (225.7 in)a (261.1 in)e (261.1 in)e
6 343 mm 6 343 mm 7 241 mm 7 241 mm
b
(249.7 in) (249.7 in)b (285.1 in)f (285.1 in)f
6 952 mm 6 952 mm
c
(273.7 in) (273.7 in)c
7 257 mm 7 257 mm
d
(285.7 in) (285.7 in)d
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base
b
4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base
c
4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base
d
5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base
e
4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base
f
5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base

268
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications

IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the front door latch pillar on the
driver’s side.

269
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)

1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).

270
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Accessories
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 20,000 km (12,000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60,000 km (36,000
miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a
copy of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Vehicle Security
Remote keyless entry
Styled wheel protector locks
Vehicle security systems
Comfort and convenience
Cargo organizers
Engine block heaters
Manual sliding rear window
Power sliding rear window
Tire step
Travel equipment
Auto headlamp system with Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Bed Tent

271
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Accessories
Box Aluminum Rack cargo storage systems (Trac Rac)
Daytime running lights (DRL)
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass and temperature display
Fog lights
Battery Warmer
Highway safety and first aid kit
Pickup box rails
Running boards and tubular running bars
Running boards diamond plate
Speed control
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitch, Class IV
Trailer hitch bars and balls
Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier
Trailer wiring harness
Protection and appearance equipment
Air bag anti-theft locks
All weather vinyl floor mats
Bed mat
Bed hooks
Bed mats
Bedliners
Carpet floor mats
Cap (hard, color keyed – Leer supplier branded)
Cap (commercial – Leer supplier branded)
Cleaners, waxes and polishes
Diamond plate bed rail caps
Diamond plate front box protection
Diamond plate splash guards
Diamond plate tool box

272
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Accessories
Door edge guards
Fender flares
Flat splash guards
Front end covers (full)
Hood deflectors
Leather wrap steering wheel
Locking gas cap
Lubricants and oils
Molded splash guards
Rear window deflector
Side window air deflectors
Stainless steel grill insert
Tailgate covers (Diamond plate)
Tonneau cover (soft)
Tonneau cover (hard, color keyed – Leer supplier branded)
Touch-up paint
Truck cover (full vehicle)
Universal floor mats
Wheels
Wheel covers
Wood trim - interim applique
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.

273
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily
affect your vehicle’s operation.)
• Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage
that may result from the use of such equipment.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

274
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
A jumping a disabled battery ....193
maintenance-free ....................222
Accessory delay ..........................54 replacement, specifications ...254
Air bag supplemental restraint servicing ..................................222
system ..........................................90 BeltMinder ...................................85
and child safety seats ..............92 Brakes ........................................114
description ................................90 anti-lock ...................................115
disposal ......................................94 anti-lock brake system (ABS)
driver air bag ............................92 warning light ...........................115
indicator light ...........................93 fluid, checking and adding ....241
operation ...................................92 fluid, refill capacities ..............254
passenger air bag .....................92 fluid, specifications .........258, 261
passenger deactivation lubricant specifications ..258, 261
switch ........................................95 parking ....................................116
Air cleaner filter .......246–247, 254 shift interlock ..........................118
Ambulance packages ....................8 Bulbs ............................................42
Antifreeze C
(see Engine coolant) ................224
Anti-lock brake system Calculating load ........................145
(see Brakes) ..............................115 Capacities for refilling fluids ....254
Audio system Cassette tape player ...................29
(see Radio) ................20, 22, 25, 29
CD changer .................................32
Automatic transmission ............118
driving an automatic CD-single premium .........20, 22, 25
overdrive .........................119, 121 Cell phone use ............................60
fluid, adding ............................242
fluid, checking ........................242 Certification Label ....................269
fluid, refill capacities ..............254 Child safety restraints ................99
fluid, specification ..................261 child safety belts ......................99
Auxiliary power point .................53 Child safety seats ......................102
Axle attaching with tether straps ..106
lubricant specifications ..258, 261 in front seat ............................104
refill capacities ........................254 in rear seat ..............................104
traction lok ..............................117 Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............210
B instrument panel ....................212
interior .....................................212
Battery .......................................222 interior trim ............................212
acid, treating emergencies .....222 plastic parts ............................211

275
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
washing ....................................209 D
waxing .....................................209
wheels ......................................210 Daytime running lamps
wiper blades ............................211 (see Lamps) ................................40
Clutch Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................241 fluid ..........................................242
operation while driving ..........124 engine oil .................................219
recommended shift speeds ....125 Doors
Compass, electronic ....................62 lubricant specifications ..........258
calibration .................................63 Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................246
set zone adjustment .................63
Driving under special
Console ........................................60 conditions ..................123, 136, 139
overhead ....................................51 sand .........................................138
snow and ice ...........................140
Coolant
through water .................138, 143
checking and adding ..............224
refill capacities ................228, 254 E
specifications ..................258, 261
Cruise control Emergencies, roadside
(see Speed control) ....................57 jump-starting ..........................193
Emission control system ..........238
Customer Assistance ................175
Ford accessories for your Engine ........................................261
vehicle .....................................214 cleaning ...................................210
coolant .....................................224
Ford Extended Service diesel ...........................................8
Plan ..........................................202 fail-safe coolant ......................229
Getting assistance outside idle speed control ...................222
the U.S. and Canada ..............206 lubrication specifications ......258,
Getting roadside assistance ...175 261
Getting the service you refill capacities ........................254
need .........................................200 service points ..........................218
Ordering additional owner’s starting after a collision .........176
literature .................................207 Engine block heater .................114
The Dispute Settlement Engine oil ..................................219
Board .......................................202 checking and adding ..............219
Utilizing the dipstick ....................................219
Mediation/Arbitration filter, specifications ........221, 254
Program ...................................205 recommendations ...................221

276
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
refill capacities ........................254 Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............232
specifications ..................258, 261
Gas mileage
Exhaust fumes ..........................114 (see Fuel economy) .................235
F Gauges .........................................16
transmission fluid
Fail safe cooling ........................229 temperature gauge ...................20
Fluid capacities .........................254 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Foglamps .....................................40 Rating) .......................................144
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......128 calculating ...............................145
description ..............................132 definition .................................144
driving off road .......................134 driving with a heavy load ......144
electronic shift ................128, 132 location ....................................144
indicator light .........................129 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
lever operated shift ................129 Rating) .......................................144
manual locking hubs ..............128
preparing to drive your calculating .......................144–145
vehicle .....................................117 definition .................................144
driving with a heavy load ......144
Fuel ............................................230 location ....................................144
calculating fuel economy .......235
cap ...........................................232 H
capacity ...................................254
choosing the right fuel ...........233 Headlamps ...................................39
comparisons with EPA fuel aiming ........................................41
economy estimates .................238 autolamp system .......................39
detergent in fuel .....................234 daytime running lights .............40
filling your vehicle flash to pass ..............................41
with fuel ..................230, 232, 235 high beam .................................40
filter, specifications ........234, 254 replacing bulbs ...................43–44
fuel pump shut-off switch .....176 turning on and off ....................39
improving fuel economy ........235
octane rating ...................233, 261 Heating
quality ......................................233 heating and air conditioning
running out of fuel .................234 system .................................36–37
safety information relating to Hood ..........................................217
automotive fuels .....................230
Fuses ..................................177–178 I

G Ignition ...............................110, 261

Infant seats
Garage door opener ....................51 (see Safety seats) .....................102

277
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) trailer towing ..........................144
testing ........................................239
Loading instructions .................145
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................212 Locks
cluster ........................................12 autolock .....................................70
lighting up panel and childproof ..................................66
interior .......................................41 Lubricant specifications ...258, 261
J Lumbar support, seats ...............76

Jump-starting your vehicle ......193 M

K Manual transmission .................124

fluid capacities ........................254
Keyless entry system lubricant specifications ..........261
autolock .....................................70 reverse .....................................125
Keys Message center ...........................60
positions of the ignition .........110 english/metric button ...............61
menu button .............................61
L Mirrors .........................................51
fold away ...................................56
Lamps heated ........................................55
autolamp system .......................39 side view mirrors (power) .......54
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................42 Moon roof ....................................52
cargo lamps ...............................41 Motorcraft parts ................234, 254
daytime running light ...............40
fog lamps ...................................40 O
headlamps .................................39
headlamps, flash to pass ..........41 Octane rating ............................233
instrument panel, dimming .....41
interior lamps ...........................42 Oil (see Engine oil) ..................219
replacing bulbs ...................42–48 Overdrive .....................................50
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................41 P
Lights, warning and indicator ....12 Parking brake ............................116
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........115
speed control ............................59 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....254
Load limits .................................144 Pedals (see Power adjustable
GAWR ......................................144 foot pedals) .................................57
GVWR ......................................144 Power adjustable foot pedals .....57

278
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Power distribution box Seats ............................................72
(see Fuses) ...............................178 child safety seats ....................102
Power door locks ..................65, 70 cleaning ...................................213
Power point .................................53 Servicing your vehicle ..............216
Power steering ..........................117 Snowplowing .................8, 171–173
fluid, checking and adding ....240 Spare tire
fluid, refill capacity ................254 (see Changing the Tire) ...........182
fluid, specifications .........258, 261
Power Windows ...........................53 Spark plugs,
specifications .....................254, 261
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................117 Special notice ................................9
ambulance conversions ..............8
R diesel-powered vehicles .............8
four-wheel drive
Radio ..........................20, 22, 25, 29 vehicles ............................173–174
utility-type vehicles ....................8
Relays ........................................177
Specification chart,
Remote entry system .................67 lubricants ...........................258, 261
illuminated entry ......................70
locking/unlocking doors ...........65 Speed control ..............................57
Reverse sensing system ...........126 Starting your
vehicle ........................110–111, 113
Roadside assistance ..................175 jump starting ..........................193
S Steering wheel
tilting .........................................50
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ........................77–81, 83 T
Safety defects, reporting ..........208 Tailgate ........................................64
Safety restraints ....................77–83 Tires ...................................247–249
belt minder ...............................85 changing ..........................182, 185
cleaning the safety belts ..........89 checking the pressure ............249
extension assembly ..................89 replacing ..................................252
for adults .............................78–81 rotating ....................................250
for children ...............................99 snow tires and chains ............253
lap belt ......................................84 tire grades ...............................248
warning light and chime ..........85 treadwear ................................248
Safety seats for children ..........102 Towing .......................................145
Seat belts (see Safety trailer towing ..........................145
restraints) ....................................77 wrecker ....................................198

279
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index
Traction-lok rear axle ...............117 Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................270
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................246 Vehicle loading ..........................144
Ventilating your vehicle ...........114
Transmission
automatic operation .........50, 118 W
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................242 Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
fluid, checking and adding Washer fluid ..............................219
(manual) .................................245
fluid, refill capacities ..............254 Water, Driving through .............143
lubricant specifications ..258, 261 Windows
manual operation ....................124 power .........................................53
Turn signal ..................................41 Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................49
V checking and adding fluid .....219
replacing wiper blades .............49
Vehicle dimensions ...................261 Wrecker towing .........................198

280
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine